Page 1 ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ E N G L I S H ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ E N G L I S H ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ User Guide LG-P936 LG-P936 www.lg.com www.lg.com P/N : MFL67527207 (1.0) P/N : MFL67527207 (1.0)
Page 3 LG-P936 .‫ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ www.lg.com ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ، ﻳ ﹸ ﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ، ﻳ ﹸ ﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ .www.lg.com ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬...
Page 4 ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 38 ................‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ 8 ................‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ 38 ......... ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ 17 ..............‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ 40 ......‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ...
Page 5 68 ............‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ 54................ Google Google ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ 68 .........‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‬ 54......... Google ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ 69 .......‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬ 55....Google ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ 69 .............‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ 57 ................‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ...
Page 6 ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 93 ..........................‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ 82 ....................‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ 93 ........‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ﹼ ﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬ 82 ........‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ 95 ..........‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ 95 ...........‫ﺑﻌﺪ...
Page 7 106 ........‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬USB ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ 107 ..........‫ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ 100 ..............‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬ 108 ..............‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ‬ 101 ..............‫ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ 108 ............‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ‬ 108 ............‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ 101 ..............‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ 110 ..............‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬...
Page 8 127 ........‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ 140 ..........‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ 12 128..............On-Screen Phone On-Screen Phone 140 ..........‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ 128..LG ‫ ﻣﻦ‬On-Screen Phone 2.0 ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ 141 ............ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ 141 .............‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ 13 132 ............................‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 141 ............‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬...
Page 9 14 142 ........................‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ 142 ........... ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ ﺎ ﹰ‬LG ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ‬ 142............(OTA) 14 144 ............‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ 144 .........‫ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ‬DivX ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ 145.........Dolby Mobile 14 146 ..............
Page 10 • ‫(. ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬SAR) ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺪ ﹼ ﺩ‬ ‫، ﻓﻬﻲ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬LG ‫ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ‬LG-P936 ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﺽ‬...
Page 11 ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌ ﻠ ﹼﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬ 0.567 ‫ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻫﻲ‬DASY4 ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃ ﻥ ﹼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﹼ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻛﺠﻢ )01 ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ( ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .(‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ 278.0 ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻛﺠﻢ )01 ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻘﻴ ﹼ ﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ...
Page 12 ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ، ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﺒ ﹰ ﺎ، ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬LG ‫ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺓ ﹰ ﺃﻡ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺓ ﹰ، ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬...
Page 13 ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮ ﹼ ﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ • ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻣﺜ ﻼ ﹰ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‬ • .(‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‬ .‫ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫•...
Page 14 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌ ﹼ ﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﻤﻮ ﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ • ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ، ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ...
Page 15 ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺛﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤ ﻜ ﱡﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻟﺲ‬ .‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ .‫ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺼﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ، ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ...
Page 16 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴ ﺒ ﹼ ﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ، ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﻦ...
Page 17 ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ‬ LG ‫ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ • .‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺼﻤ ﹼ ﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬...
Page 18 .‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ ﺎ ﹰ . ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨ ﻠ ﹼﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ، ﺧﺬﻫﺎ‬ LG ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬Electronics ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ‬...
Page 19 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ !‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ، ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 20 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬ ‫- ﻗﻠﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ Gmail™ ‫- ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟـ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ...
Page 21 ‫3. ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ، ﻓﺘﺒﻄﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ...
Page 22 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ PIN ‫4. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬PIN ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫...
Page 23 .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ، ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬Google ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ، ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬PIN ‫ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫-- ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ...
Page 24 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ USB ‫7. ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ‬micro SD ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺪ ﺧ ﹺ ﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ USB ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬USB ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬...
Page 25 ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ‬ .‫، ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬SD ‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ (LG PC Suite) ‫8. ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ‬LG PC Suite IV "LG PC Suite LG PC Suite" ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬...
Page 26 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬USB ‫ﺻ ﹺ ﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬LG ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮ ﺑ ﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣ ﹸ ﻤ ﻜ ﹼﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ."LG PC Suite" ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬...
Page 27 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 3 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﹴ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ .‫ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫01. ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ /‫21. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ .‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ...
Page 28 ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ . ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 3 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﹴ‬ .‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 3 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﹴ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ...
Page 29 ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫- ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬LCD ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ. ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫- ﻓﻲ...
Page 30 ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ (Flash Flash) ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫5.3 ﻣﻠﻢ‬ 3.5 ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ/ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬...
Page 31 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ .SIM ‫ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺃﺩ ﺧ ﹺ ﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻥ ﹼ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ :‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ...
Page 32 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ) ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‬...
Page 33 ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﹰ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .USB ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ (‫ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬USB ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ/ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .‫...
Page 34 ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻪ، ﺇﺫ‬ ‫. ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬micro SD ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬micro SD ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬LG-P936 ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‬...
Page 35 ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﻥ ﹼ‬ .‫ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬micro SD ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ micro SD ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ .‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ. ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬...
Page 36 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ micro SD ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < < ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ، ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ‬micro SD ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .SD SD ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ < < ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬SD SD ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬...
Page 37 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫، ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬micro SD ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ .micro SD ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ...
Page 38 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫. ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫- ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ) ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ( ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬MHL ‫ﺇ ﻥ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﹰ ﺍ. ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ...
Page 39 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﹰ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ ﻣﻤ ﻜ ﹼﻨ ﺔ ﹰ ﻓﻴﻪ، ﺳﻴﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ًّ ﺎ‬MHL ‫ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﹰ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ‬MHL ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ .MHL-HDMI ‫ﻟﻢ...
Page 40 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﺤﺐ - ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ...
Page 41 ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄ ﹰ ﺎ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﺟ ﹰ ﺎ‬ .‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ؛ ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭﻋﻨﺪ...
Page 42 ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ. ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ LG-P936 ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ .‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬...
Page 43 ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰ ﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 03 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ."‫"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺛﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻞ...
Page 44 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ: ﺃﺿﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ، ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬...
Page 45 ‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ :‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ (‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ )ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ...
Page 46 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻻ...
Page 47 ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ .‫ﺃﻥ...
Page 48 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ...
Page 49 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬Gmail ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬Google talk ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬GPS ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ/ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ GPS ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ...
Page 50 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ - - ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬QWERTY QWERTY ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ - - ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬LG LG ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬USB ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬...
Page 51 QWERTY QWERTY ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ - - ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬LG LG ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ .‫ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫- - ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ - ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ/ / ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ. ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬...
Page 52 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ – – ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬LG LG ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬...
Page 53 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ - ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ/ / ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ. ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ .LG ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ - ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ - ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬...
Page 54 .‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ 321 ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ .LG ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ- - ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬...
Page 55 .("á" ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ Qwerty ‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ Qwerty ."a" ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﺑﻌﺪ...
Page 56 Google ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ،‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬Google ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ Google ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ،‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬Google ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ. ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﺳﻴﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 57 ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Google ‫ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬Google ‫ﺧﻮﺍﺩﻡ‬ Google ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ، ﺛﻢ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬ Gmail™ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ، ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫...
Page 58 Google ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ Gmail ‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻄ ﻠ ﹼﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺑ ﺎ ﹰ ، ﻣﺜﻞ‬ .Play ‫ﺃﻭ ™ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻚ‬enterprise ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ...
Page 59 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ". ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ...
Page 60 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ WPA ‫ ﻭ‬WPA/WPA2- PSK‫ ﻭ‬WEP ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫- ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺔ، ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ‬ ‫1.208. )ﺑﻌﺾ‬x EAP ‫ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ‬WPA2 PSK ‫ ﻭ‬PSK Wi-Fi ‫...
Page 61 < ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ < ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ...
Page 62 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ < < ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ. . ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﻮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 0.3 ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ...
Page 63 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ DataPro ‫- ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫. ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ‬DataPro ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺔ‬ .USB ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ...
Page 64 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰ ﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬DataPro ‫ﺫﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ...
Page 65 ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ < < ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‬ Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct < <Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < < ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 66 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ .SmartShare SmartShare ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫- ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 67 .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻣﺜ ﻼ ﹰ ، ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ (‫ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻣﺜ ﻼ ﹰ ، ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 68 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ .‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ‬ .SmartShare SmartShare < ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬SmartShare SmartShare ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬Wi-Fi DMP ‫ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬DLNA ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤ ﻜ ﹼﻨﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬...
Page 69 ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ...
Page 70 ‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ )ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ( ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ .‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬...
Page 71 ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺬﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ ﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ، ﻓﻼ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺬﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫. ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬...
Page 72 ‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﺳﻴ ﹸ ﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬...
Page 73 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ .‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬...
Page 74 ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ .‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬Google ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ...
Page 75 .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳ ﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 76 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺡ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬MMS ‫ ﻭ‬SMS ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ .‫ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ .‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺗ ﹸ ﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ...
Page 77 ‫ﺍﺳﻢ/ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ، ﺗﻨﺸﺄ‬ ‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﺼ ﺪ ﹸ ﺭ‬SMS ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺣﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ 061 ﺣﺮﻓ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠ ﺪ ﹴ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ...
Page 78 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ، ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬  ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫< ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ Microsoft ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ Exchange ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ...
Page 79 .‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫( ﺁﺧﺮ‬IMAP ،POP3) ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬TLS/SSL – ‫ﺁﻣﻦ‬ ‫ ﺁﻣﻦ‬SMTP SMTP ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬...
Page 80 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬  ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ.
Page 81 ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ...
Page 82 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬Exchange ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ < ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬Exchange ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬...
Page 83 :‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬...
Page 84 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺪ ﻭ ﹼ ﻧﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ .‫< ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ...
Page 85 ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺻﻮ ﻻ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴ ﹸ ﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ +‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ...
Page 86 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ (‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬...
Page 87 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ﹼ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ. ﻭﺑﺪ ﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬...
Page 88 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ . ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .88 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﺣﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ...
Page 89 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ، ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ (.‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 90 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ MMS ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛـ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ...
Page 91 ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ : ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‬ • ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻴ ﻼ ﹰ : ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻴ ﻼ ﹰ‬ •...
Page 92 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ...
Page 93 ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﺪﻯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ، ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ .‫– ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ...
Page 94 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ < ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ .‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬...
Page 95 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﹼ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ﹼ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ - ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ - ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ. ﻭﺑﺪ ﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ...
Page 96 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ . ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .96 ‫ﺍﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﺣﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ...
Page 97 ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺓ ﹰ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﺔ ﹰ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ...
Page 98 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ - ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬HD(1280X720)‫ ﻭ‬Full HD(1920X1088) ‫ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ QVGA(320X240)‫ ﻭ‬VGA(640X480)‫ ﻭ‬TV(720X480) ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 99 ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ، ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫– ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬...
Page 100 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬micro SD ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬...
Page 101 ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 102 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ، ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ < ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ < ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬...
Page 103 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ < ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ‬USB USB ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ < ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺸ ﻐ ﹼﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ (.‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ...
Page 104 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫- ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ/ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ...
Page 105 .‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ،‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ...
Page 106 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ...
Page 107 Google ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ Google ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ‬ ‫، ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬Google ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬Google Talk ‫ ﻭ‬Gmail ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ﺗﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‬ .‫...
Page 108 Google ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬ .’’‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ‘‘ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮﺭﻙ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ...
Page 109 ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ...
Page 110 Google ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻙ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ،‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬  ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ...
Page 111 .‫ﻋﻦ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺗﻬﻢ‬ .‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬  ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺩﻋﻮﺓ‬ .‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﻋﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ...
Page 112 Google ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻠﻘﻮﻥ ﻃﻠ ﺒ ﹰ ﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺌﺔ، ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ، ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ...
Page 113 .‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ Play ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ™ﺳﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻵﻻﻑ‬Play ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ™ﺳﻮﻕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ...
Page 114 Google ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ. ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﺬ ﹴ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
Page 115 Google Talk™ ‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ .Gmail™ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟـ‬ ‫ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Google Talk™ ‫، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫. ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ‬Google ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬...
Page 116 Google ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ‬Google Talk ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ...
Page 117 ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬Google Talk ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ...
Page 118 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ/ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ .(‫)ﺇﺫﺍ...
Page 119 .‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺃﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻦ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﹰ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬Google ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ، ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ...
Page 120 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ . ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .Polaris Office Polaris Office < Polaris Office ‫ﺳﺠ...
Page 121 ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ < ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫< ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ .‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ‬ ..‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬...
Page 122 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬  ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﺘﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Excel ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Word) ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ .( PowerPoint file  ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ...
Page 123 ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ، ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺐ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ .‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ .‫ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠ ﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ...
Page 124 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻠﺔ.
Page 125 ‫ﺑﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰ ﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬...
Page 126 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ – ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻟﻤ ﺎ ﹰ ﺳﺮﻳﻌ ﺎ ﹰ ﻭﻣﻔﻌﻤ ﹰ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ – ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ .‫ﻏﻴﺮ...
Page 127 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫( ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬Really Simple Syndication) RSS ‫ﺇ ﻥ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ،‫ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ‬ :‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺷﺄﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺎﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ...
Page 128 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ – ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ • ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ .‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬...
Page 129 ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ • ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬URL ‫ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬...
Page 130 ‫ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ .(‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ: ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫- ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬LG Home Panorama ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ .On-Screen Phone .‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬...
Page 131 ‫ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬LG Home ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ :( :(‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫- ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ LG Home ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬...
Page 132 On-Screen Phone ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ On-Screen ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ < ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬Phone USB ‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎ ﻻ ﹰ ﻋﺒﺮ‬On-Screen Phone 2.0 ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ . On-Screen Phone On-Screen Phone ‫.
Page 133 ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ، ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ .On-Screen Phone ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫. ﻭﺑﺪ ﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ...
Page 134 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬VPN ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ .‫ﻭﺿﻊ...
Page 135 ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ - - ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ "ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ."‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ – – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬...
Page 136 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ - ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ - ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ...
Page 137 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ - ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺎ ﹰ – ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ‬...
Page 138 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬GPS ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ - ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ .‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺭﻉ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ/ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ...
Page 139 ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬PIN ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ . SIM ‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬PIN ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬PIN ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ...
Page 140 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ Google ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟ ﺒ ﹰ ﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ .‫ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬Google ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺬ ﻛ ﹸ ﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬PIN ‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫...
Page 141 .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ، ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬...
Page 142 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ SD ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ – ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰ ﺎ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬micro SD ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫...
Page 143 ‫. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ . 128 ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ .‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ .‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ...
Page 144 ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ ﺎ ﹰ‬LG ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ (OTA) ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬...
Page 145 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ /‫ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬Google ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬LG ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒ ﺎ ﹰ ، ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ .‫، ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬DRM .‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ...
Page 146 ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ® DivX Certified ‫. ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ‬Corporation :‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫. ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬DivX ‫ﻳﺸ ﻐ ﹼﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ Open Source ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬www.divx.com ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫...
Page 147 ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ® DivX Certified ‫ﻭ‬ ® DivX ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Rovi Corporation ‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬ Dolby Mobile Dolby Laboratories. ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ‬D ‫ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‬Dolby .Dolby Laboratories ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟـ‬...
Page 148 ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ .LG-P936 ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬LG ‫- ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤ ﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫- ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬...
Page 149 Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc (‫54+ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺷﺤﻦ‬ Address LG Twin Tower 20,Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu Seoul, Korea 150-721 ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ: 01- ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band , WCDMA and LTE Terminal Equipment...
Page 150 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫...
Page 151 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ .‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ‬ .‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗ ﹺ ﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ...
Page 152 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮ ﹼ ﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ SIM ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ .PIN2 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬...
Page 153 .‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ .‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬...
Page 154 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ...
Page 155 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬ .‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ، ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍ ﹰ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ...
Page 157 ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ، ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺑﯿﻨﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ • LG ‫ ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ‬LG .‫. ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‬LG Electronics، Inc 2012© ‫ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ • ‫ ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬LG Group ‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬...
Page 158 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ 38 ......................‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ 8 ..........‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ 38 ........‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳌﺴﯽ‬ 17 ....................‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ 39 ............‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎی...
Page 159 69 ............. ‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ 54 ....................‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ 69 ........‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎﺱ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ‬ 54 ..........‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ 70 ......‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﲤﺎﺱ‬ 55 ..........‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ 70 ............‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﲤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ 57 ......
Page 160 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ 95 ........................‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ 83 ....................‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ 95 ............‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬ 83 ........... ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ 97 ..............‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ 97 ............ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ 84 ............‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ...
Page 161 109 ...... ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ 110 ............‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ‬ 102........USB ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ 111 ............‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ‬ 103 ..............‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬ 111 ............‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ/ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ 112 ............‫ﻋﺮﺽ...
Page 162 131 .........‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ 145 ..........‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ 13 132..............On-Screen Phone On-Screen Phone 145 ..........‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ 132.......LG On-Screen Phone 2.0 145 ...........‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ 145 .............‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ 13 136 ............................‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ 146 .............‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬...
Page 163 14 147 ......................‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ 147 ........‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬LG ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ 147......(OTA) ‫ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ‬ 14 149 ..................‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‬...
Page 164 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ، ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫(. ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬SAR) ‫ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬LG-P936 ‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬ SAR ‫ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ‬ •...
Page 165 ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫(، ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ 2 ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﮐﯿﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺭ‬ICNIRP) ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ، ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﭼﻨﯿﻦ‬ .‫01 ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﯽ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ...
Page 166 ‫ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍ ﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ، ﺣﺘﻤ ﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺜ ﻼ ﹰ ، ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬ LG ‫ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﯾﺪ‬ • ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی‬...
Page 167 .‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎی ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ .(‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺰﯾﻦ، ﺗﯿﻨﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﯽ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺛﺎﺛﯿﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‬ •...
Page 168 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ .‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ، ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ...
Page 169 ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﯿﺴﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ‬ ،‫ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ...
Page 170 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺳﺨﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﯿﺸﻪ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍی...
Page 171 ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬ • .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﺮ‬LG ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ‬...
Page 172 ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﯾﺎﺩی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍ ﹰ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻤﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ LG ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‬ .‫ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ‬Electronics ‫•...
Page 173 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ، ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ، ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ .‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ !‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬...
Page 174 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫- ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ...
Page 175 ‫4. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ، ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ .‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ، ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬...
Page 176 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﻦ ﮐﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ، ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ، ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ...
Page 177 .‫ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬micro SD ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ،‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ، ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ، ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬micro SD ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬...
Page 178 ‫ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ‬ (Suite ‫ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ، ﺭﻭی‬micro SD ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ‬LG PC Suite IV .‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬...
Page 179 "LG PC Suite LG PC Suite" ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫" ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬LG PC Suite" ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬USB ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬LG ‫ﻭﺏ‬...
Page 180 USB ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ، ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮﺭ‬LG ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی/ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ/ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ LG PC" ‫ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬LG ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ، ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ‬ .‫"، ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬Suite...
Page 181 ،‫21. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫11. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ .‫ﺟﺪﺍ...
Page 182 ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ 3 ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ .‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ 3 ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬...
Page 183 ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫- ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻨﮕﯿﻦ ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ‬LCD ‫ﺁﻥ، ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬...
Page 184 ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‬ ‫5.3 ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‬ 3.5 ‫ﺟﮏ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﮏ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ/ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺎی ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﺎی ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬...
Page 185 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ. ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ :‫ﺁﻥ...
Page 186 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ‬ ) ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﯾﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(. ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩ...
Page 187 ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی، ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬USB ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ﻼ ﹰ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬ /‫ ﺭﺍ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ( ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬USB ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬USB ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬...
Page 188 ‫ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﯾﮏ‬micro SD ‫ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬LG-P936 ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ‬micro SD ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﯾﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬...
Page 189 .‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ micro SD ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬micro SD ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬...
Page 190 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ . .‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ micro SD ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ microSD ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬micro SD ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ...
Page 191 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی‬microSD ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ .‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ .‫ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ...
Page 192 ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﯿﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ /‫ )ﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪ ﺍچ ﺩی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ( ﯾﮏ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ‬MHL ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ...
Page 193 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬MHL ‫ ﮐﻪ‬HDTV ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ، ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬MHL ‫ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬HDTV ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ، ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ‬ .‫...
Page 194 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ،‫ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻥ - ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ، ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﯿﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ...
Page 195 ‫ﻭﺏ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ‬ .‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ، ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ( ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫•...
Page 196 .‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬LG-P936 ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬...
Page 197 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ .‫ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺍﻟﮕﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ‬...
Page 198 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ :‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬ • ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ، ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ، ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ،...
Page 199 ‫ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ، ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﯾﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻀﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ، ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ، ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ.
Page 200 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﯿﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ،‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ...
Page 201 [‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫]ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫< < ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬GPS ،‫، ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬Wi-Fi ،(‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬...
Page 202 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬USB ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ...
Page 203 ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬LG On-Screen Phone ‫ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ‬ ‫3 ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬USB ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬...
Page 204 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ - - ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ - - ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ‬LG LG ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ، ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬...
Page 205 ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ - - ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ - - ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ‬LG LG ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ - ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ/ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی‬...
Page 206 ‫ – – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬LG LG ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ،LG ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ - ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬...
Page 207 ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ/ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫، ﻟﻤﺲ‬LG ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ - ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬...
Page 208 ‫ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ، ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫، ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬LG ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬...
Page 209 ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .("á" ‫)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺷﺪ، ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 210 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‬ ،‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ، ﺭﻭی ﺑﻌﺪی‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ، ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
Page 211 ‫ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ، ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬Play ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬ .‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ...
Page 212 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ‬ ،Play ‫ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ ﯾﺎ‬Gmail ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ، ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺷﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬IT ‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ، ﺑﺨﺶ‬ .‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ...
Page 213 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ Wi-Fi .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ Wi-Fi Wi-Fi < ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ "ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ" ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫...
Page 214 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫- ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ WEP، WPA/WPA2- PSK، WPA ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬ ‫1.208 ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬x EAP ‫ ﻭ‬PSK، WPA2 Only PSK (.‫...
Page 215 .‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ < ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ: ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫* ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ < ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی...
Page 216 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﻭی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻭ...
Page 217 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ Bluetooth 3.0 ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬Bluetooth SIG ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫...
Page 218 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ DataPro ‫- ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ...
Page 219 ‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬ ‫ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬WLAN WLAN ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ < < DataPro ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ Wi-Fi Direct <...
Page 220 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬Directed .‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ، ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ...
Page 221 ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ، ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ SmartShare SmartShare < .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻨﮏ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ SmartShare SmartShare ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ...
Page 222 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ (‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬DLNA ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ (‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ...
Page 223 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ SmartShare SmartShare < ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ،‫ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی...
Page 224 ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ...
Page 225 ‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ، ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ، ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ‬ .‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ...
Page 226 ‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ، ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ...
Page 227 ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ...
Page 228 ‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ .‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ...
Page 229 ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ .‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی...
Page 230 ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ .‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ...
Page 231 ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ، ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی‬MMS ‫ ﻭ‬SMS ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ .‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ...
Page 232 ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ، ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬SMS ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ، ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬MMS ‫ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ /‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ...
Page 233 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬  ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫< ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﯽ‬ .‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ...
Page 234 ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﺍی‬SSL ‫ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬SSL SSL ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‬Microsoft Exchange ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ - ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ (POP3، IMAP) ‫ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬TLS/SSL ‫...
Page 235 .‫ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ، ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ‬ .‫ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ...
Page 236 ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ، ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‬ .‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ...
Page 237 ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ‬Exchange ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ‬Exchange ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؛ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫< ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی...
Page 238 ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺭﻭی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ، ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍی، ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ...
Page 239 ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺑﻼگ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﺁﻧﻼﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ < ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ .‫<...
Page 240 ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ .‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ، ﺩﺭ‬ +Social ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ...
Page 241 ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫- ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ. ﻫﻤﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺭﻭﺯ...
Page 242 ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫" ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ " .‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫< ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺩﻭ‬...
Page 243 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫< ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ - ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ .‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ - ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬...
Page 244 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ – ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 09 ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ، ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ...
Page 245 ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ، ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ، ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ، ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ...
Page 246 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩ، ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ، ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬MMS ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﯿﻨﮓ، ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ...
Page 247 .‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﺎﻥ‬ :‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬ • ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬ .‫ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ(، ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ :‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ...
Page 248 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ،‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ –ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﺑﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺌﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺮی‬ ‫ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ، ﻓﻠﺌﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ – ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ...
Page 249 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ، ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﻋﮑﺲ...
Page 250 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی...
Page 251 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ - ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ .‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ - ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ...
Page 252 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ – ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 89 ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ...
Page 253 .‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ .‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ .‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ...
Page 254 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ، ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬MMS ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﯿﻨﮓ، ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ، ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ، ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ...
Page 255 ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ‬ .‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺮی‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺋﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺮی‬ ‫ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ، ﻓﻠﻮﺋﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻥ، ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ، ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﯾﮑﯽ...
Page 256 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬ micro SD ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ، ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ...
Page 257 ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک، ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ: ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک، ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی...
Page 258 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ،‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬Gmail Gmail ،‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ،‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ، ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﯽ‬ ،‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ...
Page 259 ‫، ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ USB ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬USB ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ) USB connection mode ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫، ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ‬USB ‫ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ...
Page 260 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ smi. ‫- ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ )ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ/ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮ(، ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ، ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ‬USB ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ...
Page 261 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﯾﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ :‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ، ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ، ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ،...
Page 262 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮓ...
Page 263 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ، ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ، ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺬ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ، ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ...
Page 264 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ Gmail ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ، ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ .‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫، ﻭ‬Google Talk، Google Calendar ،‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ .‫،...
Page 265 .‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ .‫)ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ( ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬  ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ، ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ، ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 266 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ، ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﯾﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﭘﯿﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫، ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬Wi-Fi ‫ ﻭ‬GPS ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺼﺪ...
Page 267 .‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی، ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ...
Page 268 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ .‫ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭙﺬﯾﺮﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ‬ .‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎک...
Page 269 ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬  ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ .‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ، ﯾﮏ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻮﺕ...
Page 270 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫...
Page 271 ‫ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺗﺮﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ،‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬Google Checkout ‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ، ﭘﺮﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ...
Page 272 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی، ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳﺖ‬Gmail ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺯی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ، ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ...
Page 273 ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ، ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ Google Talk™ .‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ .‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻮﺭی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬Google Talk ‫– ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ Google ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ...
Page 274 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺖ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬Google Talk ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﮐﻨﺪ، ﺭﻭی ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 275 ‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ .‫ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬Google Talk ‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬Google Talk ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ...
Page 276 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ/ﺯﻧﮓ...
Page 277 .‫ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ، ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﮐﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ...
Page 278 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬ < < ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬Polaris Office .‫ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬...
Page 279 ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ) ﯾﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ < ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫< ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ، ﺁﻥ‬ .‫ﻧﺎﻡ...
Page 280 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬  Word،) ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ .‫( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬PowerPoint file ‫، ﯾﺎ‬Excel .‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ...
Page 281 .‫ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺧﻮﺩ، ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ، ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺭﻭی ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ...
Page 282 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ، ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ‬ .‫ﻣﺪﺭﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ...
Page 283 .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬...
Page 284 ‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ - ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‬ ،‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ، ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ، ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﺟﻠﻮ – ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺯﺵ، ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺷﻤﺎ...
Page 285 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ )ﺳﻨﺪﯾﮑﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ( ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی ﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬RSS ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ، ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ،‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﻭﺑﻼگ‬ :‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍ...
Page 286 ‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ – ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ • ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ .‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ –...
Page 287 .‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬URL ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ‬ ،‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ، ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ‬ • .‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬URL ‫ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ...
Page 288 ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﻭ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻥ‬ .(‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬LG Home Panorama ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ: ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫- ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬...
Page 289 ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ(: (: ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ )ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫- ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ LG ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ‬ ،‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی، ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ .‫ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬Home Panorama .‫...
Page 290 On-Screen Phone ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ Wi-Fi ‫، ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ‬USB ‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬On-Screen Phone 2.0 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬ .‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬On-Screen Phone On-Screen Phone < ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫< ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ‬ ‫...
Page 291 ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ، ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬On-Screen Phone ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬...
Page 292 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ،‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫...
Page 293 ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ‬ ‫ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ – ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫...
Page 294 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ - ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﮐﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ، ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ - ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ،‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﻧﯿﺎﺯ...
Page 295 .‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‬ .‫ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ - ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ - ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ، ﺻﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ...
Page 296 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی - ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ/ﺑﻌﺪی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ /‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ/ﭼﭗ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﻋﮑﺲ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ - ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬ .‫ﺑﻌﺪی...
Page 297 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ – ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ – ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬GPS GPS ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺳﯿﻢ ﭘﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬GPS ‫ﻫﺎی‬ .
Page 298 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ - ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک‬ ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ، ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ، ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ...
Page 299 ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ -- ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ، ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ، ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ .‫ﻟﻐﻮ...
Page 300 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬Play ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺍی، ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ – ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯی...
Page 301 ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ، ﺑﻪ ﭘﻼﮔﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ - ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬USB USB ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ...
Page 302 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ، ﺯﻣﺎﻥ، ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬...
Page 303 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬LG ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ (OTA) ‫ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ، ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬...
Page 304 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ/ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ‬ ‫ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬LG ‫- ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬DRM ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی‬...
Page 305 ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬DivX ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ .‫ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬divx.com ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ‬DivX ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ GPL،...
Page 306 ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬ ® DivX DivX ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ® DivX Certified DivX Certified .‫، ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬ ‫027، ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬P 720P ‫ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ، ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬ ®...
Page 307 LG-P936 ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ .‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬LG ‫- ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ .‫- ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬...
Page 308 Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc (‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ Address LG Twin Tower 20,Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu Seoul, Korea 150-721 ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ: 01- ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬ Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band , WCDMA and LTE Terminal Equipment...
Page 309 ‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ...
Page 310 ‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪﻫﺎ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ، ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬...
Page 311 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬ .‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ‬PIN 2 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ...
Page 312 .‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ .‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬...
Page 313 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬ .‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ/ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ...
Page 314 ‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﯿﻒ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﭘﻮﺷﯿﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ...
Page 315 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ .‫1. ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ .‫2. ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ .‫3. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﺪ‬...
Page 317 • This handset is not recommended for the visually impaired because of its touch screen keyboard. • Copyright ©2012 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities.
Page 318: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use ..8 Your Home screen ........41 Touch screen tips ........41 Getting to know your phone ....18 Proximity sensors ........43 Lock your phone ........43 Your Phone ..........28 Quick Switch to Silent Mode ....44 Home ............45 Getting Started ........31 Customizing your Home screen ....45...
Page 319 Entering accented letters ......56 Calls ............72 Making a call ..........72 Google Account Set-up ......57 Calling your contacts .......72 Creating your Google account ....57 Answering and rejecting a call ....72 Signing into your Google account .....58 Adjusting the in-call volume .....73 Making a second call ......73 Connecting to Networks and Devices ..60 Viewing your call logs ......74...
Page 320 Table of Contents Messaging/Email ........78 Once you’ve taken the photo ....92 Using the advanced settings ....93 Messaging ..........78 Viewing your saved photos ......96 Email .............80 Setting a photo as wallpaper ....97 Social Networking ........86 Video Camera ..........98 Adding an account to your phone .....86 Getting to know the viewﬁ...
Page 321 Multimedia ..........103 Working with Playlists ......108 To remove a song from a playlist ....109 Gallery ..........103 To rename or delete a playlist ....110 Sending a video ........104 Using an image ........105 Google Applications .......111 Viewing a slideshow ......105 About Google applications .....111 View photo details .........105 Google Maps™...
Page 322 Google Talk™........120 Changing the Browser settings ....134 Utilities ...........123 On-Screen Phone ........135 Setting the alarm ........123 LG On-Screen Phone 2.0 ......135 Using the calculator ......123 Settings ..........139 Adding an event to your calendar ...123 Wireless & networks ......139 Polaris Ofﬁ ce ........125 Call settings .........140...
Page 323 Dolby Mobile ........153 Voice input & output ......148 Accessories ...........154 Accessibility .........148 Connectivity settings ......148 Technical data........155 Date & time ..........149 About phone .........149 Troubleshooting ........156 Software Update ........150 Phone Software Update ......150 LG Mobile Phone Software update via Over-the-Air (OTA).........150...
Page 324: Guidelines For Safe And Efﬁ Cient Use
Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption • While there may be differences between Rate (SAR) information. This mobile phone the SAR levels of various LG phone models, model LG-P936 has been designed to comply they are all designed to meet the relevant with applicable safety requirements for guidelines for exposure to radio waves.
Page 325 • The highest SAR value for this model phone cases, transmission of data files or messages tested by DASY4 for use at the ear is 0.567 may be delayed until such a connection W/kg (10 g) and when worn on the body is is available.
Page 326 • Switch off the phone in any area where you • Repairs under warranty, at LG’s discretion, are required to do so by special regulations. may include replacement parts or boards For example, do not use your phone in...
Page 327 • Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the it may damage the phone. unit (do not use solvents such as benzene, • Do not expose the phone to liquid or thinner or alcohol). moisture. • Do not charge the phone when it is on soft •...
Page 328 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use in the absence of adequate ventilation mobile phones. may result in discomfort or minor burns. • Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, Therefore, use care when handling your PCs, etc. phone during or immediately after operation. •...
Page 329 and safety equipment. Avoid damage to your hearing • When your vehicle is equipped with an air Damage to your hearing can occur if you are bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable exposed to loud sound for long periods of wireless equipment.
Page 330 Guidelines for safe and efﬁ cient use Glass Parts Potentially explosive atmospheres Some parts of your mobile device are made of glass. This glass could break if your mobile • Do not use the phone at a refuelling point. device is dropped on a hard surface or receives •...
Page 331 Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach performance. of small children. It contains small parts which • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG may cause a choking hazard if detached. chargers are designed to maximise the battery life.
Page 332 • If you need to replace the battery, take it to • Do not expose the battery charger to direct the nearest authorised LG Electronics service sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in point or dealer for assistance.
Page 333 configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions.
Page 334: Getting To Know Your Phone
Getting to know your phone Before you start using the Managing Applications phone, please read this! From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap > > Settings Applications Please check to see if any problems you have Manage applications encountered with your phone are described When the list of applications appears, scroll in this section before taking the phone in for...
Page 335 can also monitor how applications and system To view the battery charge level resources consume battery power. From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap > > To extend the life of your battery Settings About phone Status - Turn off radio communications that you aren't using, such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or GPS.
Page 336 Getting to know your phone to a power source, or if connected to a Warning power source, how long you were last • If you install and use an OS other than running on battery power. The screen also the one provided by the manufacturer, lists applications or services using battery your phone is no longer covered by the power from greatest amount to least.
Page 337 4. Using the Unlock Pattern, Warning PIN, or Password Take precautions when using an Unlock Pattern, PIN, or Password. It is very Set an unlock Pattern, PIN, or Password to important that you remember the screen secure your phone. To set the screen lock, unlock information you set.
Page 338 Getting to know your phone times, tap You will be required same time for 8 seconds: Forgot Pattern? Power/Lock Key to sign in with your Google account and + Down Volume Key prompted to create a new unlock pattern. When FACTORY HARD RESET screen is If you haven’t created a Google account on the displayed, release the keys.
Page 339 6. Using a micro SD Card Warning Pictures, Music and Video files, can be saved Do not remove the micro SD card without to external memory. Before saving these files unmounting it first. Otherwise, it may damage the micro SD card as well as your to external memory, you need to insert a micro phone, and the data stored on the micro SD card.
Page 340 Getting to know your phone 7. Connecting your phone to a computer. You can now copy files to and from the micro SD card. computer via USB Use the USB cable that was provided with your phone to connect the phone to a USB You cannot access the micro SD card port on your computer.
Page 341 Computer (LG PC Suite) dropping between a PC and your phone LG PC Suite IV is a program that helps you connect your mobile phone to a PC using a USB data communication cable. Once Installing “LG PC Suite”...
Page 342 LG integrated USB driver is required to NOTE: Connect the USB data cable to your PC. connect an LG device and PC and installed Make sure that mode is Mass storage automatically when you install “LG PC Suite”...
Page 343 Lock Key. seconds to turn it off. Then, press and hold the again for 3 seconds to reboot Power/Lock Key 10. Hold the phone straight up the phone. Please hold the mobile phone straight 12. Do not connect your phone up as a regular phone.
Page 344: Your Phone
Your Phone To turn on the phone, press and hold the Power/Lock Key for 3 seconds. To turn off the phone, press the Power/Lock Key for 3 seconds and tap to confirm. Power off Earpiece Power/Lock Key Front-Facing Camera Lens - Powers your phone on/off by pressing and - Used to take a self-shot.
Page 345 TIPS Warning Placing a heavy object on the phone or - Tap the Menu Key whenever you sitting on it can damage its LCD and open an application to check what touch screen functionalities. Do not options are available. cover the LCD’s proximity sensor with a - If your phone has errors when you use protective film.
Page 346 Your Phone Flash Power/Lock Key Camera Lens 3.5mm Headset Jack Back Cover Charger/Accessory Port Fingertip cutout Microphone Volume Keys - Allows you to adjust the ringer and media volumes, or to adjust the in-call volume Battery during a call. SIM Card Slot - Press and hold the volume down key to Speaker switch to the silent mode.
Page 347: Getting Started
Getting Started Installing the SIM card and battery Before you can start exploring your new phone, you’ll need to set it up. To insert the SIM card and battery: Hold the phone on your hand firmly. With the other hand, lift the back cover using the fingertip cutout located on the bottom of the cover and remove it.
Page 348 Getting Started Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot. Insert the battery into place by aligning the Make sure the gold contact area on the card gold contacts on the phone and the battery. is facing downwards.
Page 349: Charging Your Phone
Replace the back cover of the phone Charging your phone (as demonstrated below). Apply a steady Connect the cabless wall adapter and USB downward pressure until the battery cover cable. clicks into place. Plug the USB cable (as shown below) into the phone's charger/accessory port.
Page 350 Getting Started NOTE NOTE Your phone has an internal antenna. Be The battery must be fully charged initially to careful not to scratch or damage this rear improve battery lifetime. area, as that will cause loss of performance. If the phone is turned off as the battery is fully discharged, the battery is called a weak battery.
Page 351: Inserting A Micro Sd Card
Insert a micro SD™ card to use the camera back cover. and other multimedia features. Multimedia contents can be saved in the micro SD card. LG-P936 has a micro SD card pre-installed. NOTE This device supports up to a 32GB micro SD card.
Page 352: Removing The Micro Sd Card
Getting Started Then insert the micro SD card into the slot. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards. Removing the micro SD card To safely remove the micro SD card from your phone, first you need to unmount it.
Page 353: Formatting The Microsd Card
Remove the battery cover and gently pull NOTE the microSD card from the slot. On Android OS 2.3 and above, you can download applications from Play Store and Warning store them on a micro SD card as well as Do not remove the micro SD card without on the phone.
Page 354: Switching Between And Exiting Applications
Getting Started NOTE NOTE All files on the card are deleted when you If there is content on your micro SD card, format the micro SD card. the folder structure may be different after formatting since all the files will have been From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key deleted.
Page 355: Mhl
and starting them as needed, to ensure that idle applications don’t consume resources MHL(Mobile High-Definition Link) is a mobile unnecessarily. audio/video interface standard for connecting Switching between applications mobile phones and other portable consumer electronics devices to high-definition televisions - Touch and hold the .
Page 356 Getting Started NOTE When your device is connected to an MHL-enabled HDTV, the cable will simultaneously charge the device and output media. If connected to an HDTV without MHL, the cable will not charge the connected device unless an MHL-HDMI adapter is used.
Page 357: Your Home Screen
Your Home screen Touch screen tips hold the contact in the Contacts list until the context menu opens. With the touch of your finger, you can access Touch and hold an item for a moment Drag - available applications, make menu selections, and then, without lifting your finger, move your and access data saved to your phone.
Page 358 Your Home screen vice versa). adjusts to the device's physical orientation. Double-tap to zoom on a Web Double-tap - NOTE page or a map. For example, quickly double-tap • To select an item, tap the center of the a section of a Web page to adjust that section icon.
Page 359: Proximity Sensors
The last screen you were Lock your phone working on opens. When you are not using the LG-P936 press the to lock your phone. Power/Lock Key This helps prevent accidental presses and saves battery power.
Page 360: Quick Switch To Silent Mode
Your Home screen on the screen. NOTE • The automatic screen timeout can be Caution configured manually in Settings. If there are more than 5 pattern drawing • If there are any programs running when errors in a row, you will be required to wait you lock the phone, they may still be for 30 seconds to retry.
Page 361: Home
Home Customizing your Home screen Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to You can customize your Home screen by view the different panels. adding quick access elements, such as You can also customize each panel with shortcuts, widgets, folders to it, or changing shortcuts, and folders.
Page 362 Your Home screen and shortcuts. Wallpaper • : Change the Home screen Tap an available widget, shortcut, or folder. Wallpaper wallpaper. You will see a new icon on the Home screen. To place it on a different panel, drag To add Widgets, Shortcuts, and Folders on the it to the desired location on the desired Home screen: panel and release your finger from the...
Page 363: Getting Back To A Recently Used Application
Getting back to a recently used NOTE application If there is no available space on a particular Touch and hold the Home screen panel, will not be Home Key available; you must delete or remove an screen will display the icons of applications item before you can add another item.
Page 364 Your Home screen recent notifications. The Notifications panel runs across the top of your screen. Vibrate Mode Wi-Fi Bluetooth Data Mode Touch and hold the Status Bar and slide it down with your finger. Or, from the Home screen, tap the Menu Key >...
Page 365: Viewing The Status Bar
Viewing the Status bar Icon Description The Status bar uses different icons to display No network signal available phone information, such as signal strength, new messages, battery life, and active Airplane mode is on Bluetooth and data connections. Connected to a Wi-Fi network Below is a table explaining the meaning of icons you are likely to see in the Status bar.
Page 366 Your Home screen Icon Description Icon Description Missed call Battery is charging Bluetooth is on Phone is connected to PC via USB cable Connected to a Bluetooth device Downloading data Alarm is set Uploading data New voicemail available GPS is on Ringer is silenced Receiving location data from GPS Vibrate mode is on...
Page 367: On-Screen Keyboard
Icon Description Icon Description Data is synchronizing USB tethering is active. Download finished Portable Wi-Fi hotspot is active New email available USB tethering & Portable Wi-Fi hotspot are active. New Gmail available Data in and out New Google Talk message available New text/multimedia message available On-screen Keyboard...
Page 368 - Tap to Number and Symbols/ Settings Key LG keyboard - QWERTY - Letters Entry change input to number and symbol entry. Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings. - Tap to delete characters to the Delete Key left of the cursor.
Page 369 LG keyboard - QWERTY The keyboard will change to alternate - Numbers and Symbols Entry characters. - Tap to change input Letters/ Settings Key to letters entry. Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings. - Tap to enter space.
Page 370 Your Home screen LG keyboard – Phone keypad To switch to the phone keypad on LG keyboard, touch and hold . Tap LG keyboard settings > , then tap . The Keyboard layout Phone keypad Phone keypad allows you to enter letters by...
Page 371: Entering Text
Double-tap for all caps. change input to number and symbol entry. The coloured circle on the button tells you Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard if uppercase is locked on or if it is settings.
Page 372: 123 Mode
Your Home screen from the screen. Entering accented letters Deletes any text you have Delete Key- When you select French as the text entry entered. language, you can enter special French characters (e.g., “á”). To enter a space, tap From Phone Keypad 123 Mode After the corresponding letter character This mode allows you to enter numbers...
Page 373: Google Account Set-Up
Google Account Set-up The first time you open a Google application the text, you can move to the next text field on your phone, you will be required to sign in by tapping on the keyboard. Next with your existing Google account. If you do not When you’re finished entering your name have a Google account, you will be prompted and username, tap...
Page 374: Signing Into Your Google Account
Google Account Set-up Signing into your Google Google services, such as Gmail , Contacts, Google Calendar, and Picasa photo albums. account You can also use Google Maps , download Enter your email address and password, applications from Play Store™, back up your then tap Sign in settings to Google servers, and take advantage...
Page 375 and other information from these applications and services on the web are synchronized with your phone. If you don’t sign into a Google Account during setup, you will be prompted to sign in or to create a Google Account the first time you start an application that requires one, such as Gmail or Play Store™.
Page 376: Connecting To Networks And Devices
Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi > Wireless & networks Wi-Fi To use Wi-Fi on your phone, you need access To connect to a Wi-Fi Network to a wireless access point, or "hotspot." Turn off Wi-Fi when you're not using it to Some access points are open and you can extend the life of your battery.
Page 377 - If the network is open, you are prompted NOTE to confirm that you want to connect to that This device supports WEP, WPA/WPA2- network by tapping Connect PSK, WPA PSK, WPA2 Only PSK and 802.1x EAP. (Some EAP methods are not - If the network is secured, you are supported.) If your Wi-Fi service provider prompted to enter a password or...
Page 378: Bluetooth
Connecting to Networks and Devices Bluetooth How to send data from your phone via Bluetooth Using Bluetooth You can send data via Bluetooth by running a From the screen, tap Wireless & networks corresponding application, not from Bluetooth to turn on the Bluetooth setting. Bluetooth menu, unlike regular mobile phones.
Page 379 Settings > Wireless & networks > Bluetooth > . Check if Bluetooth is turned on Bluetooth settings. Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. and tap . Then tap the device Scan for devices Tap Discoverable to place a checkmark and you want to send data to from the list.
Page 380: Data Tethering
Connecting to Networks and Devices Data Tethering You can use your phone to provide a data The supported Bluetooth version is connection to a computer by activating data Bluetooth 3.0 and certified by Bluetooth tethering and connecting them with a USB SIG.
Page 381: Mobile Hotspots
Mobile Hotspots NOTE You can also use your smartphone to provide - Data Tethering requires an appropriate DataPro a mobile broadband connection for up to 8 data plan. Devices connected by tethering use data other devices. Create a hotspot and share your from your DataPro plan.
Page 382: Wi-Fi Direct
Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi Direct NOTE Learn to use the WLAN Direct feature to Mobile Hotspots requires an appropriate DataPro data plan. Devices connected to connect two devices via a WLAN without your Mobile Hotspot use data from your requiring an access point.
Page 383: Wi-Fi Share
Wi-Fi Share Select devices you want to share with and then touch the . When the other device You can share your music, picture and video accepts the request, it starts sending. content between users connected via the Use menu key to use more of its functions. same Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Directed or potable hotspot network.
Page 384 Connecting to Networks and Devices this feature. Under the Sharing contents section, tap each type of content you would like to To turn SmartShare on and allow sharing share. Choose from , and Pictures Videos contents Music Tap the > Applications Key is now activated and ready to SmartShare...
Page 385 To share contents from your phone to your NOTE renderer device(e.g. TV) Make sure that the DLNA functionality of your devices is properly configured (e.g. NOTE TV and PC) Make sure that your renderer device is properly configured. Tap the >...
Page 386 Connecting to Networks and Devices the files. To download contents from remote content library NOTE Tap the > Applications Key Follow the similar steps to use the Music SmartShare player, Camera and Video player to share Tap the top left button and select the device contents.
Page 387 To upload contents from my phone to remote Select a device of remote content library to content library be uploaded. NOTE NOTICE Make sure that SD card is correctly Some DLNA enabled devices do not support DMS upload functionality and will Receive files mounted and the in settings...
Page 388: Calls
Calls Making a call Calling your contacts to open the keypad. to open your contacts. Enter the number on the keypad. To delete a Scroll through the contact list or tap the digit, tap the icon box and enter the first letter(s) of the Clear Search contact you want to call.
Page 389: Adjusting The In-Call Volume
to the right. Adjusting the in-call volume Drag the icon to the left to reject Decline To adjust the in-call volume during a call, use an incoming call. Drag the Excuse Msg bar the volume up and down keys on the left side upwards if you want to send a message to the of the phone.
Page 390: Viewing Your Call Logs
Calls screen. Your initial call will be locked and missed voice calls. put on hold. Tap the Contact on the screen to toggle Tap any single call log entry to view the between calls or tap to merge the calls. date, time, and duration of the call.
Page 391 From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap Settings Call settings...
Page 392: Contacts
Contacts You can add contacts on your phone and Adding a new contact synchronize them with the contacts in your and enter the new contact’s Google Account or other accounts that support number. Tap the , tap Menu Key Add to syncing contacts.
Page 393: Favourite Contacts
Favourite Contacts and then tap to open your contacts. You can classify frequently called contacts as favourites. Tap the tab and tap Groups favourites To add a contact to your favourites Tap a contact to view its details. From the Home screen, tap the Applications Tap the gold star to the right of the contact’s and then tap...
Page 394: Messaging/Email
Messaging/Email Messaging in the field. As you enter the contact name, matching contacts appear. You can Your phone combines SMS and MMS into one tap a suggested recipient. You can also add intuitive, easy-to-use menu. multiple contacts. Threaded box NOTE Messages (SMS and MMS) exchanged with You will be charged for a text message for another party can be displayed in chronological...
Page 395 to send your message. Send Warning The message screen opens, with your If an image, video, or audio file is added to message after recipient name/number. an SMS message, it will be automatically Responses appear on the screen. As you converted into an MMS message and you will be charged accordingly.
Page 396: Email
Messaging/Email Changing your message settings To open the Email application  Your phone's message settings are predefined, From the Home screen, tap the Applications so you can send messages immediately. > Email You can change the settings based on your The first time you open the application, Email...
Page 397 – Enter the server address server address. Server address – Choose whether or not to use SSL – TLS/SSL/Off. Use SSL Secure type for Microsoft Exchange. – Normally each account’s default Port number number will be displayed. Other (POP3, IMAP) Email Account –...
Page 398 Messaging/Email The account will now appear in the list of You can tap an account to view its . The Inbox accounts in your Email folder. default account from which you send email is indicated with a checkmark. The Accounts Screen To open your Combined Inbox screen lists your Accounts...
Page 399 screen. to attach the file you want to Attach send with your message. When a new email arrives in the inbox, there will be sound and vibration notification. Tap the Send email notification to end it. If you are not ready to send the message, to save it in a folder.
Page 400 Messaging/Email you’re connected to a network. If it contains Working with Account Folders any pending messages, the will be Outbox Each account has Inbox Outbox Sent displayed on the screen. Accounts . Depending Drafts Trash Junk folders on the features your account service provider NOTE supports, you may have additional folders.
Page 401 account. To change account settings Open the screen. Accounts Tap the > Menu Key Settings To delete an email account Open the screen. Accounts Touch and hold the account you want to delete. in the menu that Remove account opens and tap in the dialogue box Remove to confirm.
Page 402: Social Networking
Social Networking With your phone, you can enjoy social NOTE networking and manage your micro-blog in Additional costs may be incurred when on-line communities. You can update your connecting and using online services. current status, upload photos, and view your Check your data charges with your friends’...
Page 403: Adding A Social Networking Widget On The Home Screen
Enter your email address and password NOTE : If there is no available space on a that you set up for your social networking particular Home screen panel, you won't be account, then tap able to add any widget; you must delete or Log in remove an item before you can add another Adding a social networking...
Page 404: Syncing Accounts On Your Phone
Social Networking You can select each social application you'd Syncing accounts on your like to view. Tap the phone Tap "What are you doing?" field to update You can sync information from your social your status with comments or upload networking accounts with your Contacts and pictures.
Page 405: Removing Accounts On Your Phone
been enabled. Removing accounts on your phone From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key > > Settings Accounts & sync Tap the account(s) you want to delete, then (twice). Remove account...
Page 406: Camera
Camera To open the Camera application, tap > Applications Key Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Camera Switch - Allows you to switch between the front- facing and back-facing cameras. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out. Alternatively you can use the Volume Keys.
Page 407 Settings – Tap this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 9 3 . Video mode – Slide this icon down to switch to video mode. Taking a photo – Allows you to take a photo. Gallery –...
Page 408: Taking A Photo
Camera Taking a photo NOTE From the Home screen, tap Camera A shading issue may occur when you take a picture indoors, due to the characteristics Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens of the camera. (Shading means a colour towards the subject you want to photograph.
Page 409: Using The Advanced Settings
Using the advanced settings NOTE In the viewfinder, tap to open the Additional charges may apply when MMS messages are sent while roaming. advanced options. You can change the camera settings by Set as Tap to use the image as Contact icon scrolling the list.
Page 410 Camera from the following options: • : It's good to capture the sunset 8M(3264X2448), Sunset scenery. W6M(3264X1836), 5M(2560X1920), 3M(2048X1536), W3M(2304X1296), • : It's good to capture the night scenery. Night 1M(1280X960), W1M(1536X864). Slow shutter speeds are used to detect night –...
Page 411 , or This is ideal if you want to be geotagging, you can see the pictures displayed 5 sec 10 sec. included in a photo. on a map. – Choose from Shot mode Normal, Continuous NOTE , and shot Panorama. This function uses wireless networks.
Page 412: Viewing Your Saved Photos
Camera and your Gallery will be displayed. NOTE • When you exit the camera, some settings will return to their defaults. Check the Flick left or right to view other photos or camera settings before you take your videos. next photo. SlideShow –...
Page 413: Setting A Photo As Wallpaper
Setting a photo as wallpaper Tap the photo you want to set as wallpaper to open it. Tap the screen to open the options menu. > > > Menu More Set as Wallpaper Crop the image as desired and tap Save...
Page 414: Video Camera
Video Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Camera Switch - Allows you to switch between the front- facing and back-facing cameras. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out.Alternatively you can use the Volume Keys. Brightness – This defines and controls of the amount of sunlight entering the lens.
Page 415 Settings – Tap this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 101 . Camera mode – Slide this icon up to switch to camera mode. Start recording – Allows you to start recording. Gallery –...
Page 416: Recording A Video
Video Camera Recording a video Tap the Stop icon on the screen to stop recording. From the Home screen, tap Camera slide the camera mode button to change to After recording a video Video mode. The icon will change to A still image representing your video will appear The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen.
Page 417: Using The Advanced Settings
Adjust the video camera settings by scrolling Tap to edit the name of the selected Rename the list. After selecting the option, tap the Back video. Tap to delete the video you just recorded. – Tap to set the size (in pixels) of Video size Tap OK to confirm it.
Page 418: Watching Your Saved Videos
Video Camera – Choose a colour tone to use for Colour effect Watching your saved videos your new video. In the viewfinder, tap – Choose to record a Audio recording Mute Your Gallery will appear on the screen. video without sound. Tap a video to play it automatically.
Page 419: Multimedia
Multimedia You can store multimedia files to a micro SD Calendar View card to have easy access to all your image and In Folder view, tap to change to the video files. Calendar view. The calendar will open and you will see with photos taken on the days.
Page 420: Sending A Video
Multimedia Gallery menu options send normally. Tap a photo and tap the to see Menu Key the following available options: Share, Delete, If you have a social networking account and More. Tap More to access Details, Set as, set up on your phone, you can share Crop Rotate Right and Rotate left your photo with that social networking...
Page 421: Using An Image
, your video will be attached to Viewing a slideshow Messaging a message, which you can then write and To view a slideshow of your photos, open the send normally. Gallery and tap a photo. Once the photo is displayed, tap the screen to see the menu. Tap Using an image to begin the slideshow of all your Slideshow...
Page 422: Transferring Fi Les Using Usb Mass Storage Devices
Multimedia Transferring files using USB NOTE mass storage devices If you don't want to see USB connection mode popup, uncheck Don't ask again To transfer files using a USB device: on USB connection mode popup or turn Connect the phone to a PC using a USB Settings >...
Page 423: How To Save Music/Video Fi Les To The Phone
How to save music/video files the phone's removable storage using a card reader. to the phone - If there is a video file with a subtitle file (.smi Connect your phone to the PC file with the same name as the video file), using the USB cable.
Page 424: How To Play Music/Video Fi Les On The Phone
Multimedia How to play music/video files to go back to the beginning of the song. Tap twice to go back to the on the phone previous song. Playing music/video files To change the volume while listening to music, Locate the file you want in the Gallery and tap press the up and down Volume Keys on the left it to play it.
Page 425: To Remove A Song From A Playlist
the order you set or in a shuffle. or tapping Add to playlist Save as playlist save all the songs in an album that you're To create a playlist playing as a playlist. When viewing a list of songs in the library, touch and hold the first song you want to To remove a song from a add to the new playlist.
Page 426: To Rename Or Delete A Playlist
Multimedia To rename or delete a playlist NOTE Open the library. Playlist Music file copyrights may be protected by international treaties and national copyright Touch and hold the playlist to display the laws. Therefore, it may be necessary to menu, then tap Delete Rename obtain permission or a licence to reproduce...
Page 427: Google Applications
Google Applications About Google applications From the Home screen, tap the Applications and tap Maps Google applications, including mobile versions Tap the icon on the map. My location of Gmail, Google Talk, Google Calendar, and Google Maps, are loaded on your phone. The map centers on a blue dot that indicates your location.
Page 428: Searching For Locations And Places
Google Applications  Tap the balloon to access additional options. To search for a location While viewing a map, tap the Search field at To view map, satellite, or traffic the top of the screen. You can also tap the layers and tap Menu Key...
Page 429: Getting Directions
Tap the icon for car, public transit, or NOTE walking directions. Location information might be inaccurate if . The directions to your Get directions GPS and Wi-Fi is turned off. Please make destination appear in a list. sure that GPS and Wi-Fi is turned on. To view turn-by-turn directions in Getting Directions a list...
Page 430: My Places
Google Applications  To search for locations along your When you're finished, tap the icon Navigation to return to Navigation View. route You can search for businesses, points of My Places interest, and other features along your route. bookmarks your favourite places, My Places When you search while navigating, your results such as addresses or local businesses, to be...
Page 431: Latitude
To clear a map To join Latitude  While viewing a map, tap the Menu Key While viewing a map, tap the Menu Key and tap Clear Map and tap Join Latitude The first time you join Latitude, you're Latitude prompted to accept or reject the Google Finding Your Friends with Google Latitude privacy policy.
Page 432: Places
Google Applications To invite friends to share their locations Latitude, they receive an email inviting them to sign in to Latitude with their Google After you join Latitude, you can start sharing Account. your location with your friends. Only friends whom you have explicitly invited or accepted Places can see your location.
Page 433: Play Store
icon to your Home screen. applications and games from Play Store™, they appear in the phone's menu below the preloaded applications, and you can find them Menu Key While viewing a map, tap the by scrolling down with your finger. You can >...
Page 434 Google Applications its details screen, or further sort the NOTE subcategory by tapping Top paid, Top To purchase a paid app, you’ll need to free, Top Grossing, Top New paid, Top New set up a payment method with Google Free, Trending. Checkout™.
Page 435: Gmail
synchronization settings, Gmail™ on your NOTE phone is automatically synchronized with When you want to exit a game or your Gmail™ account on the web.The inbox application, use the Home or Back Key, conversations list is your default Gmail™ view. which will return you to the Home screen.
Page 436: Google Talk
Google Applications screen within an account. word(s) you entered. – Sign out from chat. When you Sign out Google Talk™ tap the Talk icon from the Home screen, you Google Talk™ is Google’s instant messaging will be signed in automatically if you activate program.
Page 437 notification of each message that you receive in notification in the Status Bar when a new a chat and also to sound a ringtone or vibrate chat message arrives. the phone. to choose a ringtone Select ringtone You can also configure Google Talk to sign you that will ring to notify you of a new chat.
Page 438 Google Applications friends see an outline of an AndroidTM next To set Google Talk to change your to your name in their Friends list when you status are signed into Google Talk on an Android From the Friends list, tap the Menu Key phone.
Page 439: Utilities
Utilities Setting the alarm Tap the number keys to enter numbers. For simple calculations, tap the function you From the Home screen, tap the Applications want (+, –, x, or ÷), followed by =. and tap Alarm/Clock. For more complex calculations, tap the To add a new alarm, tap the tab (if tap the...
Page 440 Utilities To repeat the event, set , and set Repetition and tap Calendar , if necessary. Reminders To view an event, tap the date. The events to save the event in the calendar. Save occurring on that date are displayed below A coloured square in the calendar will the Calendar.
Page 441: Polaris Ofﬁ Ce
Polaris Office skip the registration process, tap Later for folders and documents on My Files With Polaris Office, you can view, create and your micro SD card. edit document files on your device. The loaded files can be from micro SD cards of your Tap the >...
Page 442 Utilities View and edit a document on your NOTE device You can also open an attachment in an From the Home screen, tap the Applications email by tapping the attachment in the message. > Polaris Office. for folders and documents My Folders The document opens for you to view.
Page 443 zoom level you want. To display the toolbar in an existing document, Tap the then Menu Key  Use the toolbar at the bottom of the screen select Edit Mode. to edit the document (Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file). Tap a toolbar icon and the corresponding tool options will be displayed in a pop-up ...
Page 444: Voice Control
Utilities Manage documents online Voice Control From the Home screen, tap the Applications You can search by voice and complete other > Polaris Office voice actions, such as calling or texting a contact, sending an email, creating a note or >...
Page 445: Voice Recorder
Voice recorder Sending the voice recording Once you have finished recording, you can Use the voice recorder to record voice memos send the audio clip. Tap Share or other audio files. Choose from Bluetooth, Wi-Fi share, Email, Recording a sound or voice .
Page 446 Utilities tab. The applications with high consumption of resource will have descriptions in red. Touch stop icon to terminate the applications. You are allowed to see the installed applications by tapping on the Installed apps tab. You are allowed to see the capacity of System memory and SD card by tapping the Storage tab.
Page 447: The Web
The Web Browser webpages similarly to how you would on a computer. The Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world Back – Moves to the previous web page. of games, music, news, sports, entertainment, and much more, right on your mobile phone. Forward –...
Page 448: Using Options
The Web Using options NOTE Tap the to view the following Menu Key RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a family of web feed formats used to publish frequently updated options: content, such as blog entries, news headlines or Read it later – To add the current web podcasts.
Page 449: Adding Bookmarks
page as shortcut to home screen. Share page – Tap to share the web page. • – To view the web page details. Page info Find on page – Allows you to find text on the current web page. • –...
Page 450: Changing The Browser Settings
The Web Changing the Browser settings and set any desired options.
Page 451: On-Screen Phone
(only available with applications that drag on your PC screen. support rotation). allows you to Text input with keyboard: Launches LG Home Panorama or changes compose a text message or note using your...
Page 452 On-Screen Phone computer keyboard. double-clicking the shortcut. sends Please make sure that LG Home is the File transfer (mobile phone to PC): NOTE: a File from your mobile phone (e.g. Gallery, default launcher. Some widgets may not work Video Player, music and Polaris Office) to your properly on the LG Home Panorama.
Page 453 How to connect your mobile phone NOTE to your PC Please make sure that On-Screen Phone check On-Screen Phone 2.0 provides USB, Bluetooth box in Settings > Connectivity > On-Screen Phone is selected. and Wi-Fi connection. Please follow the Please make sure that the battery may run out instruction on Connection Wizard of OSP more quickly due to the current consumption if program.
Page 454 On-Screen Phone To check the phone-to-PC To disconnect your phone from connection your PC Once the devices have been connected, Click in the top left of the On-Screen drag down the Status Bar at the top of the Phone window. Alternatively, drag down the Home screen to check the On-Screen Phone Status Bar at the top of the Home screen connection status.
Page 455: Settings
Settings Wireless & networks Tap again to turn it off. This menu allows you to manage Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connections, portable hotspot Press and hold the Power/Lock Key and data tethering, airplane mode and VPN and tap Airplane mode. connections. To access this menu, from the Press and hold the Power/Lock Key Home Screen, tap...
Page 456: Call Settings
Settings key and touch You can Advanced Tethering & portable hotspot – configure the tethering and portable Wi-Fi Tick the check box Wi-Fi Direct settings – hotspot settings. to make Wi-Fi Direct active. Set Wi-Fi Direct device name and scan for other devices. Displays the list of Virtual VPN settings –...
Page 457: Sound
forwarding, Additional settings, Send Messages, - Select the ringtone for Phone ringtone Call duration. incoming calls. - Select the ringtone for Notification ringtone Sound notifications such as new messages receipt or Adjust sound, notification default settings and calendar events. vibrate mode. You can also manage audible and - Select whether to hear Audible touch tones Haptic feedback.
Page 458: Display
Settings keys and on certain user interface interactions. automatically turns off. Change the resolution Screen optimization - Display size of downloaded applications to fit the – Adjust the brightness of the Brightness screen size. screen. - Allows you to reset Motion sensor calibration –...
Page 459: Location & Security
device. Location & security - Checkmark this to mute the incoming Mute – If you check Use Use wireless networks call by flipping the phone over while the phone wireless networks, your phone will determine is ringing. your approximate location by using Wi-Fi and mobile networks.
Page 460 Settings administrators. pattern. You can set a PIN or Password instead of a Pattern or leave it as None. – Allows you to access Use secure credentials secure certificates When you turn on your phone or wake up the screen, you're prompted to draw your unlock –...
Page 461 follow the process below. When you can’t recall your Unlock Pattern, PIN, Password: Tap the , tap > Menu Key Settings If you logged into a Google account on the > Location & security Set up screen lock phone and failed to use the correct pattern 5 select between Pattern, PIN Password...
Page 462: Applications
Settings Keys to cancel. Caution If you perform a hard reset, all user Applications applications and user data will be deleted. - Checkmark to permit the Unknown sources Please remember to back up any important installation of applications you get from Web data before performing a hard reset.
Page 463: Accounts & Sync
To protect your phone and personal data, only Accounts & sync download applications from trusted sources Allows you to enable Background data, Auto- such as Play Store. sync and synchronize or add new accounts. – Manage and remove Manage Applications Privacy installed applications.
Page 464: Language & Keyboard
Settings Language & keyboard NOTE Select language and customize the input Requires additional plug-ins to become method and keyboard settings. selectable. Voice input & output Connectivity settings Set Voice recognizer settings and use the Text- - Your phone can be USB connection mode to-Speech settings to configure the Android used as a mass storage device if you have...
Page 465: Date & Time
Date & time Set date, time, time zone and date and time formats. About phone View legal information, check phone status and software versions, and perform the software update.
Page 466: Software Update
This feature is only available if and when http://www.lg.com LG makes the newer version of the firmware As the mobile phone firmware update requires available for your device. the user’s full attention for the duration of the...
Page 467 NOTE and your DRM licence —might be lost LG reserves the right to firmware updates in the process of updating your phone's available only for selected models at its software. Therefore, LG recommends that...
Page 468: Copyrights And Trademarks
Copyrights and trademarks Certified ® device that plays DivX video. Visit Notice: divx.com for more information and software Open Source Software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. To obtain the corresponding source code ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open ®...
Page 469: Dolby Mobile
DivX Certified ® to play DivX ® video up to HD 720p, including premium content. ® ® DivX , DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. Dolby Mobile Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Page 470: Accessories
Travel adaptor Data cable Connect your LG-P936 and PC. User Guide Stereo headset Learn more about your LG-P936. NOTE: - Always use genuine LG accessories. Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty. - Accessories may vary in different regions.
Page 471: Technical Data
Name LG Electronics Inc -10°C Min: Address LG Twin Tower 20,Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band , WCDMA and LTE Terminal Equipment Model Name...
Page 472: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures There is no SIM card SIM error in the phone or it is Make sure that the SIM card is correctly inserted.
Page 473 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures To change a security code, you will need to confirm the new code Codes do not by re-entering it. If you forget the code, contact your service provider. match The two codes you have entered do not match.
Page 474 Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Dialing error New network not authorised. New SIM card Check for new restrictions. Calls not inserted. Contact service provider or reset limit with PIN2. available Pre-paid charge limit reached. On/Off key pressed Press the On/Off key down for at least two seconds. too briefly.
Page 475 Contact problem Plug the charger into a different socket. Charging If the charger does not warm up, replace it. error Only use original LG accessories. No voltage Replace battery. Charger defective Wrong charger Battery defective...
Page 476 Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Number not The Fixed dialling Check the Settings menu and turn the function off. permitted number function is on. Impossible to receive / Memory full Delete some messages from the phone. send SMS & picture Files not Unsupported file...
Page 477 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures The screen does not turn If you use any protection tape or case, check to see if it Proximity sensor on when I has covered the area around the proximity sensor. Make problem receive a sure that the area around the proximity sensor is clean.
Page 478 Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures 1. Turn the phone off. 2. Remove the battery cover. Phone locked and does not Restarting the phone 3. Install the battery. function. 4. Close the cover. 5. Turn the phone on again.

LG P936 User Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for LG P936

Summary of Contents for LG P936

Table of Contents